News
TrainingPeaks Retail Store is Now Open
Start Browsing
- Products / Plans
- / Plans & Exercise Libraries
Plans & Exercise Libraries
- About Plans
- Authors
- View Author
- Training Plans
- Meal Plans
- Search for Plans
- Popular Plans
- Exercise Libraries
- Buy Exercise Library
- Buy Plan
- Featured Authors
- Browse by Event
Running
Marathon Half Marathon 10 K Plans 8 K Plans 5 K PlansTriathlon
Ironman Triathlon Half-Ironman Triathlon Olympic Triathlon Sprint Triathlon Base Period Youth TriathlonCycling
Century Power Meter Time Trialing Cyclo-Cross Road Cycling Mountain Biking Cross Country MTB 100 Mile MTB BMX ComputrainerSeasonal Plans (All Types)
Spring Summer Fall Winter Off SeasonNutrition
Weight Loss Weight Gain Vegetarian All Nutrition PlansOther
Adventure Racing Duathlon XTerra Strength Core Strength Youth Plansby Gale Bernhardt 13 weeks $64.95
You can currently swim three times per week for about an hour, estimating a race swim pace of 1:45 to 2:00 per 100 yards. You are currently doing a long bike ride at about 90-minutes and you estimate an average of 15 to 18 miles per hour for the race. You can currently do a long run that is about 75-minutes long. Weekday training needs to be light, but weekend training hours are more available. The total training hours for the first week of the plan are 8:00 (please see the Plan Preview) and the biggest week of training, Week 11, is 10:30. The long run builds to 2:00 and the long ride builds to 4:00.
The major differences between this plan and the 13-Week Intermediate plan are training volume, the volume of training above Zone 2 and the format of long training days. (In this plan the long run is on Saturday and the long ride is Sunday. In the intermediate plan the long run is Sunday and the long ride is Saturday.) Of course there is also one more week of training with this plan.
Plan is available in the book “Training Plans for Multisport Athletes”
by Gale Bernhardt 12 weeks $64.95
You are a triathlete with experience at sprint and Olympic-distance racing. You keep in good condition most of the year. You currently swim two to three times per week and this may or may not be with a masters team. You are cycling two to three days per week and a two-hour ride is normal for you. You run two to three days per week, with the long run of the week lasting about an hour. Strength training may or may not be part of your weekly routine. A suggested strength training routine is included in the plan for athletes wanting to compliment their endurance training with strength training.
In short, you think of yourself as an intermediate triathlete with a good base of swimming, cycling and running. You've thought about racing longer distances, but just haven't gotten around to making yourself a plan. If this description fits you, this may be the plan you’ve been looking for.
You can view a portion of the plan by selecting Plan Preview. Throughout the plan, weekly training hours range from 7:15 to 14:15. This plan builds the long run to 2:15 and the long ride to 4:30. This plan includes more weekly training volume and more workout time at higher intensities than does the 13-Week Half-Ironman Distance Beginner Plan.
Originally appeared in the May 2001 issue of “Triathlete” magazine
by Gale Bernhardt 16 weeks $64.95
If the words above read as though they came from your personal thought-bubble, I disagree with you. There is a common misperception that in order to complete an ironman distance event, one must train 20 to 30 hours per week and average speeds that few athletes can accomplish. To comfortably complete an ironman distance event, 20 to 30 hours per week of training is simply not necessary. The average speed needed is not that of The Roadrunner. So, what does it take?
For race day, if you estimate it is possible to swim 2.4 miles at a pace of 2’50” per 100 yards (2:00 swim time), ride 112 miles averaging 15.7 miles per hour (7:08 bike time), run or run/walk 26.2 miles at a 12’47” pace per mile (5:38 marathon time) and add about 30 minutes in for transitions, these times make it possible to finish an ironman race in 15:16. That gives you 1:44 of “reserve” time for unforeseen problems. Ironman is possible.
This 16-week plan begins with Week 1 between 5:30 and 6:30 total training time. The long run begins at 1:00 and the long ride between 1:30 and 2:00. (See the plan preview.) The plan builds fitness so you swim 1:30, run about 3:00 and ride about 6:00 on the weekend of Week 12. The total training for Week 12 is between 13:15 and 14:15. Yes, that amount of training is enough. After Week 12, a few weeks of tapering volume has you rested and ready to go on race day.
Originally appeared in the June 2003 issue of “Triathlete” magazine
by Gale Bernhardt 13 weeks $64.95
You can currently swim three times per week for about an hour, estimating a race swim pace of 1:45 to 2:00 per 100 yards. You are currently doing a long bike ride at about 90-minutes and you estimate an average of 15 to 18 miles per hour for the race. You can currently do a long run that is 75- to 90-minutes long. Weekday training needs to be light, but weekend training hours are more available. The total training hours for the first week of the plan are 8:45 and the biggest week of training, Week 11, is 13:15 hours.
In Week 11 are your longest workouts. On Saturday you have a 1:30 swim workout and a 5:00 bike ride. Sunday is a 3:00 run. Volume tapers significantly the final two weeks of the plan to have you rested and ready for race day.
Originally appeared in the June 1999 issue of “Triathlete” magazine
Plan is available in the book “Training Plans for Multisport Athletes”
by Gale Bernhardt 13 weeks $64.95
This plan is for the experienced triathlete, who currently averages 12 hours of training per week. You can swim two to three times per week for about an hour. You ride two or three days per week and a three-hour ride is easy and normal for you. You run two or three days per week and can comfortably run long for between 1:30 and 1:45.
You can see if the plan is right for you by having a look at the Plan Preview. Weekly training hours for the plan are between 7:15 and 18:00. To best utilize the plan you need to know your T-Pace in swimming (see the Swimming Intensity document) and heart rate zones discussed in the Intensity document.
Originally appeared in the June 2001 issue of “Triathlete” magazine
by Jim Vance 6 weeks $69.95
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $129.00
Designed for the FITNESS to COMPETITIVE athlete, this ultimate half Ironman training program by 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott draws on his 30+ years of experience as an athlete and coach.
This plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 11.5 hours per week and builds to 13.5 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The 3 to 4 sessions each week per discipline (swim, bike, run) include progressive workloads with unique marker sets, which will determine your optimal race pace. Brick workouts are included to further enhance your race preparation by allowing you to monitor your nutritional needs. Monday is the designated day off.
Successfully racing the half Ironman distance requires an element of speed so this plan includes some anaerobic, higher intensity session that you will give you a higher metabolic return than only doing moderate intensities.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This program can be adjusted to fit your shortened training schedule if you miss the first few weeks. If you can complete 70%+ of the workouts, you will see results through race-simulated sets and bricks that replicate the physical and psychological tests of your race.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $129.00
Designed for the FITNESS to COMPETITIVE athlete, this ultimate half Ironman training program by 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott draws on his 30+ years of experience as an athlete and coach.
This plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 11.5 hours per week and builds to 13.5 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The 3 to 4 sessions each week per discipline (swim, bike, run) include progressive workloads with unique marker sets, which will determine your optimal race pace. Brick workouts are included to further enhance your race preparation by allowing you to monitor your nutritional needs. Monday is the designated day off.
Successfully racing the half Ironman distance requires an element of speed so this plan includes some anaerobic, higher intensity session that you will give you a higher metabolic return than only doing moderate intensities.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This program can be adjusted to fit your shortened training schedule if you miss the first few weeks. If you can complete 70%+ of the workouts, you will see results through race-simulated sets and bricks that replicate the physical and psychological tests of your race.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 12 weeks $179.00
Designed for the FITNESS to COMPETITIVE athlete, this ultimate half Ironman training program by 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott draws on his 30+ years of experience as an athlete and coach.
This plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 8 hours per week and builds to 13.5 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The 3 to 4 sessions each week per discipline (swim, bike, run) include progressive workloads with unique marker sets, which will determine your optimal race pace. Brick workouts are included to further enhance your race preparation by allowing you to monitor your nutritional needs. Monday is the designated day off.
Successfully racing the half Ironman distance requires an element of speed so this plan includes some anaerobic, higher intensity session that you will give you a higher metabolic return than only doing moderate intensities.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This program can be adjusted to fit your shortened training schedule if you miss the first few weeks. If you can complete 70%+ of the workouts, you will see results through race-simulated sets and bricks that replicate the physical and psychological tests of your race.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 12 weeks $179.00
Designed for the FITNESS to COMPETITIVE athlete, this ultimate half Ironman training program by 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott draws on his 30+ years of experience as an athlete and coach.
This plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 8 hours per week and builds to 13.5 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The 3 to 4 sessions each week per discipline (swim, bike, run) include progressive workloads with unique marker sets, which will determine your optimal race pace. Brick workouts are included to further enhance your race preparation by allowing you to monitor your nutritional needs. Monday is the designated day off.
Successfully racing the half Ironman distance requires an element of speed so this plan includes some anaerobic, higher intensity session that you will give you a higher metabolic return than only doing moderate intensities.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This program can be adjusted to fit your shortened training schedule if you miss the first few weeks. If you can complete 70%+ of the workouts, you will see results through race-simulated sets and bricks that replicate the physical and psychological tests of your race.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $149.00
Performing at a level to qualify for Kona requires devotion, dedication and the “right” training program.Designed for the EXPERIENCED to ADVANCED triathlete, 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott has hand-crafted this Ironman distance training plan with the wisdom and tools of 30+ years of coaching expertise to give you a challenging plan that will take you to the next level.
Beginning 8 weeks before your goal race, this training plan incorporates a purposeful and progressive training protocol leading up to your goal race. The plan – with a minimum of 3 swims, 3 bikes and 3 runs per week each - begins at 18 hours per week and builds up to 21 hours per week before tapering. Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential, plus, time trials, unique bricks and race-specific workloads that simulate the challenges of your Ironman-distance event. Key blocks of intensity extract the maximum potential out of your physiology. Programs that only focus on going long and steady often overlook these important intensity sessions.
Dave’s Ironman plan is challenging, entertaining and the ultimate confidence builder for your preparation to EXCEL.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $149.00
Performing at a level to qualify for Kona requires devotion, dedication and the “right” training program.Designed for the EXPERIENCED to ADVANCED triathlete, 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott has hand-crafted this Ironman distance training plan with the wisdom and tools of 30+ years of coaching expertise to give you a challenging plan that will take you to the next level.
Beginning 8 weeks before your goal race, this training plan incorporates a purposeful and progressive training protocol leading up to your goal race. The plan – with a minimum of 3 swims, 3 bikes and 3 runs per week each - begins at 18 hours per week and builds up to 21 hours per week before tapering. Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential, plus, time trials, unique bricks and race-specific workloads that simulate the challenges of your Ironman-distance event. Key blocks of intensity extract the maximum potential out of your physiology. Programs that only focus on going long and steady often overlook these important intensity sessions.
Dave’s Ironman plan is challenging, entertaining and the ultimate confidence builder for your preparation to EXCEL.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 12 weeks $199.00
Performing at a level to qualify for Kona requires devotion, dedication and the “right” training program.Designed for the EXPERIENCED to ADVANCED triathlete, 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott has hand-crafted this Ironman distance training plan with the wisdom and tools of 30+ years of coaching expertise to give you a challenging plan that will take you to the next level.
Beginning 12 weeks before your goal race, this training plan incorporates a purposeful and progressive training protocol leading up to your goal race. The plan – with a minimum of 3 swims, 3 bikes and 3 runs per week each - begins at 14 hours per week and builds up to 21 hours per week before tapering. Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential, plus, time trials, unique bricks and race-specific workloads that simulate the challenges of your Ironman-distance event. Key blocks of intensity extract the maximum potential out of your physiology. Programs that only focus on going long and steady often overlook these important intensity sessions.
Dave’s Ironman plan is challenging, entertaining and the ultimate confidence builder for your preparation to EXCEL.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 12 weeks $199.00
Performing at a level to qualify for Kona requires devotion, dedication and the “right” training program.Designed for the EXPERIENCED to ADVANCED triathlete, 6x Ironman World Champion Dave Scott has hand-crafted this Ironman distance training plan with the wisdom and tools of 30+ years of coaching expertise to give you a challenging plan that will take you to the next level.
Beginning 12 weeks before your goal race, this training plan incorporates a purposeful and progressive training protocol leading up to your goal race. The plan – with a minimum of 3 swims, 3 bikes and 3 runs per week each - begins at 14 hours per week and builds up to 21 hours per week before tapering. Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of our plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential, plus, time trials, unique bricks and race-specific workloads that simulate the challenges of your Ironman-distance event. Key blocks of intensity extract the maximum potential out of your physiology. Programs that only focus on going long and steady often overlook these important intensity sessions.
Dave’s Ironman plan is challenging, entertaining and the ultimate confidence builder for your preparation to EXCEL.
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $149.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 8-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out at 16-17 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 8 weeks $149.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 8-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out at 16-17 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 16 weeks $229.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 16-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 13.5 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 16 weeks $229.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 16-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 13.5 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 24 weeks $299.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 24-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 7 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Dave Scott, 6x Ironman World Champion 24 weeks $299.00
Designed for the NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE triathlete, this 24-week training plan by Dave Scott will prepare you for the ultimate challenge of any Ironman distance race. The plan starts out with moderate volume and intensity at 7 hours per week and builds to 21 hours per week over the course of the plan prior to tapering to prepare you optimally for race day. The plan workouts are progressive and typically have 3 sessions per week per discipline (i.e. swim, bike, run). Monday is the designated day off.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of Dave's plan.
This plan includes "marker sets,” which are periodic tests designed to challenge you, assess your progress and provide a realistic projection of race day potential. You have the flexibility of adding or deleting workout sessions depending upon your progression, work commitments, and available training time.
Following this program by completing at least 70% of the training sessions will give the fitness and confidence you need to perform successfully in you Ironman distance triathlon.
Sign up and get ready for a fun, challenging training program!
Included: This plan comes with Dave’s comprehensive Triathlon Training Plan Guide explaining Dave’s training methodology and all the workout terminology plus video training tips by Dave covering optimal fueling, proper pacing, mental training tactics, race day strategy and more!
Questions? Please visit Dave on the web at davescottinc.com or email: info@davescottinc.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
When you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base period and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includesour comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 8 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for the EXPERIENCED Half Ironman distance triathlete, the primary goal of this 8-week BASE PERIOD training plan is to set you up for success in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
This plan progresses through two 4-week base periods (12 hrs max per week) with each week containing 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3 hrs biking and 1.75 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 8 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 8-week BASE BUILDING training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
This plan progresses through two 4-week base periods and one build period (11 hrs max per week). Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 2.5 hrs biking and 1.5 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
This plan is targeted at a novice / improver triathlete, aiming to complete the 70.3distance and targetting a race with a hilly or relatively hilly bike leg. They should be onfident at standard or sprint distance triathlon and possibly have completed a half ironman distance race already and looking to improve.
Prior to commencing this plan athletes should have at least 3-4 weeks of preparation training under their belt and be comfortable riding for 2+ hours and running for 60 minutes continuously.
Training plan volume is between7 and 11.5 hours per week, and is organised on a 3 week macrocycle - every 3rd week is a recovery week, often including self testing sessions. The weekly schedule includes 2-3 swim sessions, 2-3 bike sessions and 2-3 run sessions. Intensity is generally based on heart rate and / or perceived exertion. One or two ‘strength’ / conditioning sessions each week are recommended in addition to the swim, bike and run sessions detailed.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
“Safe to say I nailed it… Entirely down to following the training you set out. I can’t thank you enough, I would never have reached my best without your help.”
(Keith Sanders)
This plan is targeted at a novice / improver triathlete, aiming to complete the 70.3distance race in Raleigh. They should be confident at standard or sprint distance triathlon and possibly have completed a half ironman distance race already and looking to improve.
Prior to commencing this plan athletes should have at least 3-4 weeks of preparation training under their belt and be comfortable riding for 2+ hours and running for 60 minutes continuously.
Training plan volume is between7 and 11.5 hours per week, and is organised on a 3 week macrocycle - every 3rd week is a recovery week, often including self testing sessions. The weekly schedule includes 2-3 swim sessions, 2-3 bike sessions and 2-3 run sessions. Intensity is generally based on heart rate and / or perceived exertion. One or two ‘strength’ / conditioning sessions each week are recommended in addition to the swim, bike and run sessions detailed.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
“Safe to say I nailed it… Entirely down to following the training you set out. I can’t thank you enough, I would never have reached my best without your help.”
(Keith Sanders)
This plan is targeted at a novice / improver triathlete, aiming to complete the UK Ironman 70.3distance race. They should be confident at standard or sprint distance triathlon and possibly have completed a half ironman distance race already and looking to improve.
Prior to commencing this plan athletes should have at least 3-4 weeks of preparation training under their belt and be comfortable riding for 2+ hours and running for 60 minutes continuously.
Training plan volume is between7 and 11.5 hours per week, and is organised on a 3 week macrocycle - every 3rd week is a recovery week, often including self testing sessions. The weekly schedule includes 2-3 swim sessions, 2-3 bike sessions and 2-3 run sessions. Intensity is generally based on heart rate and / or perceived exertion. One or two ‘strength’ / conditioning sessions each week are recommended in addition to the swim, bike and run sessions detailed.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
“Safe to say I nailed it… Entirely down to following the training you set out. I can’t thank you enough, I would never have reached my best without your help.”
(Keith Sanders)
by David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in your IRONMAN New Zealand race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 2 hours
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in your IRONMAN New Zealand race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 3 hours
- Run: 90 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in your IRONMAN New Zealand race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 75 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in your IRONMAN New Zealand race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (7.5 to 8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN New Zealand Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 120 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR successful IRONMAN New Zealand finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR successful IRONMAN New Zealand finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 70 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR successful IRONMAN New Zealand finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5 to 6 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 8 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 8-week base period training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
The plan provides an 8-week structured and periodized plan to build your base (8 to 12.5 hrs per week) in the 3 to 6 months prior to an Ironman distance triathlon. Each week contains 2-3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). Long ride is Saturday and long run is Sunday. We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time for any race.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 70 min continuously
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan can start or end any day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 2 hours
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 2 hours
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 3 hours
- Run: 90 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 3 hours
- Run: 90 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 75 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 75 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (7.5 to 8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with multiple Ironman finishes, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (7.5 to 8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 120 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 120 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 70 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 70 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5 to 6 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE Ironman-distance triathletes with limited or no Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you for YOUR Successful IRONMAN Race Finish.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5 to 6 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan contains one base period and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hrs biking and 2.5 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 3.5 hours continuously
- Run: 2 hours continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan contains one base period and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hrs biking and 2.5 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 3.5 hours continuously
- Run: 2 hours continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 70 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 70 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 70 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 70 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Race Day on Sunday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please chose the Sunday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 minutes continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
“It's never too late to be what you might have been” - George Elliot
Especially designed for female age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN SUCCESS on race day.
Please note: This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day. This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Race Day on Saturday" plan version.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and elite triathlete Krista Schultz, MEd, CSCS this plan encapsulates her exercise physiology expertise with more than a decade of experience as an endurance athlete and coaching hundreds of other athletes to succes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race (week 1 is race week), this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (17.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5 hours running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
This program may be set to start or end at any time for a goal race that takes place on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please chose the Saturday version of our plan.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 minutes continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to Krista Schultz at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at shedoestri.com or email Krista directly at: krista@shedoestri.com.
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes who have completed at least one Half Ironman, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 2 hours
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 10 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 1,000 meters or yards
- Bike: 3.5 hours
- Run: 2 hours
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 3 hours
- Run: 90 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $127.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 14 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 3 hours
- Run: 90 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 75 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $157.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 18 weeks before your race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 2.5 hours
- Run: 75 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (7.5 to 8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $197.00
"You are an Ironman®!” When you hear these magical words as you cross the finish line, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Designed for MASTERS (40+) triathletes with at least Half Ironman experience, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR IRONMAN Race.
Crafted by Exercise Physiologist and Coach David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his education, experience - 28 Ironman distance finishes with an 8:51 PR - success and passion coaching hundreds of triathletes to achieve their excellence...beyond what they knew they could do.
Beginning 24 weeks before your race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (7.5 to 8 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (18 hrs biggest training week) prior to tapering for your race. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. Long rides are on Saturday with long runs on Sunday. Monday is the designated day off. Using the plan, you will build up to: 3,800 yards (or meters) swimming, 5-6 hours biking and 2.5-3 hours running.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by Jim Vance 6 weeks $69.95
by Jim Vance 8 weeks $79.95
by Jim Vance 137 weeks $79.95
by Jim Vance 20 weeks $99.95
by Jim Vance 20 weeks $99.95
by Jim Vance 18 weeks $99.95
This plan takes a balanced approached to training and preparation, understanding the bike and run will be the two biggest factors in your race performance. Some may find that certain sports do not get trained enough, but key factors to performing well have been considered when designing this plan. The plan is great for athletes with a HR monitor, but also those without.
The plan follows a Linear Periodization model which will stress athletes, with recovery periods to allow for proper recovery and adaptation. If athletes follow the workouts as listed and suggested, they will see the benefit of performing at your peak for the half-ironman! If athletes modify the plan, and do not follow the guidelines of the daily workouts, the results may vary.
by Jim Vance 16 weeks $149.99
Training weeks start at 8 hours, and get as high as one week of 17 hours. The average is 12-14 hours of training per week, with an Ironman race to be completed on a Saturday.
This plan takes a balanced approached to training and preparation, understanding the bike and run will be the two biggest factors in your race performance. Some may find that certain sports do not get trained enough, but key factors to performing well have been considered when designing this plan. The plan is great for athletes with a HR monitor, designed with this in mind, but also those without.
The plan follows a Linear Periodization model which will stress athletes, with recovery periods to allow for proper recovery and adaptation. If athletes follow the workouts as listed and suggested, they will see the benefit of performing at your peak for the Ironman! If athletes modify the plan, and do not follow the guidelines of the daily workouts, the results may vary.
Training weeks start at 8 hours, and get as high as one week of 17 hours. The average is 12-14 hours of training per week, with an Ironman race to be completed on a Sunday.
This plan takes a balanced approached to training and preparation, understanding the bike and run will be the two biggest factors in your race performance. Some may find that certain sports do not get trained enough, but key factors to performing well have been considered when designing this plan. The plan is great for athletes with a HR monitor, designed with this in mind, but also those without.
The plan follows a Linear Periodization model which will stress athletes, with recovery periods to allow for proper recovery and adaptation. If athletes follow the workouts as listed and suggested, they will see the benefit of performing at your peak for the Ironman! If athletes modify the plan, and do not follow the guidelines of the daily workouts, the results may vary.
by Jim Vance 20 weeks $149.99
Training weeks start at 7.5 hours, and get as high as one week of 17 hours. The average is 12-14 hours of training per week, with an Ironman race to be completed on a Saturday.
This plan takes a balanced approached to training and preparation, understanding the bike and run will be the two biggest factors in your race performance. Some may find that certain sports do not get trained enough, but key factors to performing well have been considered when designing this plan. The plan is great for athletes with a HR monitor, designed with this in mind, but also those without.
The plan follows a Linear Periodization model which will stress athletes, with recovery periods to allow for proper recovery and adaptation. If athletes follow the workouts as listed and suggested, they will see the benefit of performing at your peak for the Ironman! If athletes modify the plan, and do not follow the guidelines of the daily workouts, the results may vary.
Training weeks start at 7.5 hours, and get as high as one week of 17 hours. The average is 12-14 hours of training per week, with an Ironman race to be completed on a Sunday.
This plan takes a balanced approached to training and preparation, understanding the bike and run will be the two biggest factors in your race performance. Some may find that certain sports do not get trained enough, but key factors to performing well have been considered when designing this plan. The plan is great for athletes with a HR monitor, designed with this in mind, but also those without.
The plan follows a Linear Periodization model which will stress athletes, with recovery periods to allow for proper recovery and adaptation. If athletes follow the workouts as listed and suggested, they will see the benefit of performing at your peak for the Ironman! If athletes modify the plan, and do not follow the guidelines of the daily workouts, the results may vary.
by Jim Vance 11 weeks $125.00
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 17, with the build period being mostly around 17 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the 70.3, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Jim Vance 11 weeks $125.00
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 17, with the build period being mostly around 17 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the 70.3, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Jim Vance 11 weeks $125.00
The hours for the plan range from 12 to 21, with the build period being mostly around 20 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the Ironman, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Jim Vance 11 weeks $125.00
The hours for the plan range from 12 to 21, with the build period being mostly around 20 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the Ironman, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Gordo Byrn 12 weeks $119.95
This plan has been modified so the weekday training is held to no more than 90 minutes per day. The weekends have training on both days and there are a few overload weekends with long rides on both days.
This plan assumes that you have completed one of my Base modules and have established your endurance.
While the average training load is 11 hours per week, this plan is challenging because the key workouts are very specific to your needs as a Half Ironman athlete. Where appropriate, I have explained how experienced athletes can beef up the plan a bit.
Strength training is not emphasized but I have placed one strength session per week into the plan.
There is an important Half Ironman simulation workout that falls six weeks out from your goal race. You can substitute a B-, or C-, priority event for this race. An Olympic Distance race would be the most appropriate choice. If you are new to Half Ironman racing then, I believe, you will get the most benefit from following my race simulation workout that weekend.
The swimming program is focused on distance freestyle improvement with main set distance capped around 3000 meters (3300 yards). Where appropriate, I have explained how to dial the program up, or down.
The plan is appropriate for athletes racing all distances with weekly volume ranging from 8 to 13 hours per week.
Swim - up to 3,300 yards / 3,000 meters
Bike - up to 40 miles / 65 kilometers
Run - up to 10 miles / 16 kilometers
I hope you enjoy,
gordo
by Gordo Byrn 12 weeks $119.95
This plan assumes that you have completed one of my Base modules and have established your endurance.
While the average training load is 11 hours per week, this plan is challenging because the key workouts are very specific to your needs as a Half Ironman athlete. Where appropriate, I have explained how experienced athletes can beef up the plan a bit.
Strength training is not emphasized but I have placed one strength session per week into the plan. This session falls on Monday in the first 6 weeks of the plan and Wednesday in the second 6 weeks of the plan. Within my own training I would use two session per week until the until the final two weeks of the plan. If you want to place a second strength session then the combo that fits best is Monday/Friday (first 6 weeks) and Wednesday/Sunday (next 4 weeks)
There is an important Half Ironman simulation workout that falls six weeks out from your goal race. You can substitute a B-, or C-, priority event for this race. An Olympic Distance race would be the most appropriate choice. If you are new to Half Ironman racing then, I believe, you will get the most benefit from following my race simulation workout that weekend.
The swimming program is focused on distance freestyle improvement with main set distance capped around 3000 meters (3300 yards). Where appropriate, I have explained how to dial the program up, or down.
The plan is appropriate for athletes racing all distances with weekly volume ranging from 8 to 13 hours per week.
Swim - up to 3,300 yards / 3,000 meters
Bike - up to 40 miles / 65 kilometers
Run - up to 10 miles / 16 kilometers
I hope you enjoy,
gordo
This plan assumes that you have completed one of my Base modules and have established your endurance.
The best way to incorporate this plan into your seaon is to complete one of my 15 week base modules that ends with a Half Ironman race. Then... take 2-3 weeks of lighter training to recover from the race and prepare for the Specific Preparation block.
If you are racing a late season Ironman event then I recommend you phase your year as either: Base/Base/IM Specific Prep; or Base/Half IM Specific Prep/IM Specific Prep. Drop me a line if you want my advice on how best to play it.
Remember that Ironman is a LONG day for everyone. You will see that the key workouts of this block are designed to build your endurance and help teach you what it takes to run well and finish strong.
The core load varies between 11 and 14 hours per week. Rather than dropping weekly volume way down in recovery weeks, I have built in mini-recovery-blocks of 3-5 days duration.
Strength training is not emphasized but I have placed one strength session per week into the plan. This session falls on Wednesday. Within my own training I would use two session per week until the until the final two weeks of the plan. If you want to place a second strength session then the combo that fits best is Wednesday/Sunday.
The swimming program is focused on distance freestyle improvement with main set distance capped around 3200 meters (3500 yards). Where appropriate, I have explained how to dial the program up, or down.
I hope you enjoy,
gordo
Plan is designed with the assumption that longer sessions take place on the weekends and shorter, more intense sessions will occur during the weekdays. Monday is assumed to be an off day.
Use this in conjuction with the exercise component that you're following either from your coach or independently- the perfect synergy!
The first week of this plan calls for field testing. Athletes will use these tests to set their training zones. You will be able to use this plan with a heart rate monitor, pace or power meter, or simply training by feel. A second round of field testing will happen in the 9th week of training.
This plan calls for a weekly brick workout on Saturday's and a long run on Sunday's. Longest ride is 6 hours and the longest run is 2.5 hours.
Included with the training plan is a document that defines all the training terms. Happy Training!
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 17.
This plan assumes that the athlete has spent signifiant time training in a Base phase. This plan will develop your race specific speed and get you fresh for your key season race. The weekly volume for this plan begins at 11 hours to a maximum of 16 hours per week. Each week includes 3 swims, 3 runs, and 3 bikes, with Monday being a rest day.
You can use a heart rate monitor, pace or power meter, or just train by perceived exertion with this plan. Attached to this plan is a document that details the training terms and definitions for your reference. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions.
We can adjust the races in between the start of the plan and Ironman. I suggest a couple of Olympic Distance races as well as a Half Iron if possible. If you are not up for paying for an additional Half, we can simulate the effort.
Good luck and welcome aboard!
by Scott Iott 18 weeks $89.99
This plan takes the approach of completion as the main goal of the half ironman race. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing a half ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan. Because this is plan is designed for someone who has limited time, other disciplines may not be focused on as heavily.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a pace/power meter, heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes the approach of completion as the main goal of the Ironman. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan. Because this is plan is designed for someone who has limited time, other disciplines may not be focused on as heavily.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
As the programme is 7 months long you must be at a certain level before starting. You will be fit enough to begin this programme if;
1. you have completed a 1/2 Ironman or 70.3 event in the last 3 months
2. you have completed 2-3 seasons of Standard distance triathlons
2. you have already been training for the last 2 months and have a good basic level of fitness (e.g - You can swim 2k non stop, you can cycle 56miles (90k) non stop and you can run 6 miles (10k) without discomfort
by Ben Greenfield 35 weeks $199.00
by Scott Iott 23 weeks $129.99
This plan takes the approach of completion as the main goal of the Ironman. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan. Because this is plan is designed for someone who has limited time, other disciplines may not be focused on as heavily.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a power meter on the bike and HR monitor, GPS watch or feel on the run.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a power meter on the bike and HR monitor, GPS watch or feel on the run.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
Athletes should be able to make the swim cutoff time (2.5 hours), run 40 minutes without stopping and ride 2 hours consecutively before starting this training program. Weekly hours range from 10-15, with the average at about 13. Included in each week are three swims, three runs, and three bikes. The longer brick workout is written for Saturday and the long run on Sunday.
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a power meter on the bike and HR monitor, GPS watch or feel on the run.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a power meter on the bike and HR monitor, GPS watch or feel on the run.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a heart rate monitor or who trains using the rate of perceived exertion scale.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
This plan takes a balanced approach to training and uses the philosophy of linear periodization. There is a base phase followed by a build phase then a two week taper phase. The two biggest determiners in successfully completing an Ironman are bike and run performance as a result these two sports are a key focus in this plan.
This plan can accomadate an athlete who uses a power meter on the bike and HR monitor, GPS watch or feel on the run.
Attached is a document that details training terms and definitions. Feel free to contact Scott Iott at siott@trainingbible.com if you have any questions. Happy Training!!
E-mail elite@pacificfit.net for your Triathlon Northwest discount code.
E-mail elite@pacificfit.net for your Triathlon Northwest discount code.
by Jim Vance 25 weeks $199.00
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 17, with the build period being mostly around 17 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the 70.3, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Jim Vance 25 weeks $199.00
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 17, with the build period being mostly around 17 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the 70.3, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Ben Greenfield 25 weeks $199.00
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 21, with the build period being mostly around 20 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the Ironman, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
The hours for the plan range from 8 to 21, with the build period being mostly around 20 hours. The plan also provides help in planning for the Ironman, getting specific bike pacing skills and nutrition logistics.
by Alan Kipping-Ruane 2 weeks $29.00
by Alan Kipping-Ruane 2 weeks $19.00
I have also included my race tips on race selection, nutrition and transitions.
You'll have everything you need - from your meal plan to your carbo loading, your pre-race bricks, race week and race day detailed instructions, and, of course, all workouts throughout the entire taper and final 4 weeks.
by Mike Ricci, USA Triathlon Elite Coach 12 weeks $100.00
70.3 Half Ironman, Intermediate to Advanced
Author: Mike Ricci, USAT Triathlon Level 3 CoachStarts: Anytime
Length: 12 Weeks
Time: 191 hours
This program should be used for an athlete whose goal is to race a 70.3 Half Ironman Triathlon and has solid fitness in the past 8-12 weeks. Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 3,000 yards, bike at least 2.5 hours and be able to run for 90 minutes. The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. Most of the weeks are around 12-15 hours with some lower volume weeks around 10 hours. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line! We’ll guide you every step of the way with a detailed plan and free complimentary access to our D3 Message Forum.
Our programs are designed for the age group triathlete who has a busy life with a full time job, a family and / or other responsibilities.
Our plans set YOU up for success! We have sold thousands of our plans internationally and many or our athletes are returning customers who keep coming back for more! Our main goal with this plan is to get you to cross the finish line happy and healthy!
Years of coaching experience goes into the design of our plans! USA Triathlon Elite Coach Mike Ricci has designed these plans with his twenty years of coaching expertise. Mike has written the training plans for our Age Group World Teams seven times and is the coach of the University of Colorado Triathlon team (the 3 time defending National Champions). Mike’s passion is getting you to the finish line and having an enjoyable experience along the way. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line!
Purchase of this plan includes our 'Training Terminology' and our "How to use Intensity" documents. You’ll also have access to our online videos for run drills. We leave no stone unturned in trying to get you to reach your goals!
During the training plan, there is testing every few weeks throughout the program to test your fitness level so you can re-adjust your HR Zones if you train with a HRM. If you don’t train with a HRM, that’s fine as the tests are still good training and you can measure improvement based on time.
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary access to the D3 Forum at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
If you have questions about the plan, please feel free to email Coach Mike Ricci at any time: Mike@D3Multisport.com and check out our website at: www.D3Multisport.com.
by Mike Ricci, USA Triathlon Elite Coach 16 weeks $89.00
70.3 Half Ironman, Advanced by RPE
Author: Mike Ricci, USAT Triathlon Level 3 CoachStarts: Anytime
Length: 16 Weeks
Time: 191 hours
This program should be used for an athlete whose goal is to race a 70.3 Half Ironman Triathlon by RPE and should be used by an athlete who is coming off an Olympic Distance Race and: 1.They have a very strong base of 4-6 months of consistent training. 2. They have a strong swim or run background. 3. They have trained for at least 10-12 hours per week.
Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 2,000 yards, bike at least 2 hours and be able to run for 60 minutes. The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work. The maximum volume is around 14-16 hours pretty consistently and some of the easier weeks are around 11-13 hours. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line! We’ll guide you every step of the way with a detailed plan and free complimentary access to our D3 Message Forum.
Our programs are designed for the age group triathlete who has a busy life with a full time job, a family and / or other responsibilities.
Our plans set YOU up for success! We have sold thousands of our plans internationally and many or our athletes are returning customers who keep coming back for more! Our main goal with this plan is to get you to cross the finish line happy and healthy!
Years of coaching experience goes into the design of our plans! USA Triathlon Elite Coach Mike Ricci has designed these plans with his twenty years of coaching expertise. Mike has written the training plans for our Age Group World Teams seven times and is the coach of the University of Colorado Triathlon team (the 3 time defending National Champions). Mike’s passion is getting you to the finish line and having an enjoyable experience along the way. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line!
Purchase of this plan includes our 'Training Terminology' and our "How to use Intensity" documents. You’ll also have access to our online videos for run drills. We leave no stone unturned in trying to get you to reach your goals!
During the training plan, there is testing every few weeks throughout the program to test your fitness level so you can re-adjust your HR Zones if you train with a HRM. If you don’t train with a HRM, that’s fine as the tests are still good training and you can measure improvement based on time.
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary access to the D3 Forum at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
If you have questions about the plan, please feel free to email Coach Mike Ricci at any time: Mike@D3Multisport.com and check out our website at: www.D3Multisport.com.
by Mike Ricci, USA Triathlon Elite Coach 17 weeks $100.00
70.3 Half Ironman, Beginner to Intermediate
Author: Mike Ricci, USAT Triathlon Level 3 CoachStarts: Anytime
Length: 17 Weeks
Time: 191 hours
This program should be used for an athlete whose goal is to race a 70.3 Half Ironman Triathlon and has good fitness in the past 4-6 weeks. Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 2,000 yards, bike at least 2 hours and be able to run for 60 minutes. The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. Most of the weeks are around 10-15 hours with some lower volume weeks around 10 hours. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line! We’ll guide you every step of the way with a detailed plan and free complimentary access to our D3 Message Forum.
Our programs are designed for the age group triathlete who has a busy life with a full time job, a family and / or other responsibilities.
Our plans set YOU up for success! We have sold thousands of our plans internationally and many or our athletes are returning customers who keep coming back for more! Our main goal with this plan is to get you to cross the finish line happy and healthy!
Years of coaching experience goes into the design of our plans! USA Triathlon Elite Coach Mike Ricci has designed these plans with his twenty years of coaching expertise. Mike has written the training plans for our Age Group World Teams seven times and is the coach of the University of Colorado Triathlon team (the 3 time defending National Champions). Mike’s passion is getting you to the finish line and having an enjoyable experience along the way. By race day we will have you ready when you toe the line!
Purchase of this plan includes our 'Training Terminology' and our "How to use Intensity" documents. You’ll also have access to our online videos for run drills. We leave no stone unturned in trying to get you to reach your goals!
During the training plan, there is testing every few weeks throughout the program to test your fitness level so you can re-adjust your HR Zones if you train with a HRM. If you don’t train with a HRM, that’s fine as the tests are still good training and you can measure improvement based on time.
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary access to the D3 Forum at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
If you have questions about the plan, please feel free to email Coach Mike Ricci at any time: Mike@D3Multisport.com and check out our website at: www.D3Multisport.com.
We want you to be stronger than ever going in to your first Base Period.
The plan starts at 5 hours per week, and builds to an average 9 hours a week with a max of 10 hours a week.
This plan uses heart rate zones and perceived effort for pacing and effort level.
The athlete should already be comfortable swimming at least 1500-2000 yards in the pool at a time, up to 40-50 miles on the bike, and up to 6-8 miles running.
by Ben Greenfield 24 weeks $129.00
E-mail elite@pacificfit.net for your Triathlon Northwest discount code.
by Ben Greenfield 24 weeks $129.00
E-mail elite@pacificfit.net for your Triathlon Northwest discount code.
by Ben Greenfield 24 weeks $129.00
E-mail elite@pacificfit.net for your Triathlon Northwest discount code.
Along with building the volume of the three disciplines to provide the athlete with the confidence of having a solid finish in an Ironman-distance triathlon, this plan will help the athlete build swim/bike/run-specific strength during the training with muscle tension intervals and hill repeats. The full spectrum of cardiovascular development is also targeted to provide the athlete with the greatest chance of increasing his/her aerobic capacity.
The plan is periodized with a rest week every fourth week and has a three-week linear taper to allow the athlete to absorb the training dose.
This plan has two rest days per week (M/F) with the long run and bike stacked on the weekend days (Sat/Sun). A brick workout occurs on alternating weekends from the long bike/long run weekends.
If the athlete is starting the training plan with a solid endurance base, you may choose to lengthen the long run/long bike based on your preference and fitness level as long as rest weeks maintain reduced volume.
Along with building the volume of the three disciplines to provide the athlete with the confidence of having a solid finish in an Half-Ironman-distance triathlon, this plan will help the athlete build bike-specific strength during the training with muscle tension intervals and hill repeats. The full spectrum of cardiovascular development is also targeted in all three disciplines to provide the athlete with the greatest chance of increasing his/her aerobic fitness.
The plan is periodized with a slight rest week every fourth week and has a three-week linear taper to allow the athlete to fully absorb the training dose.
Enjoy and Happy Training!
Brian Guillen
guillenbrian@yahoo.com
USAT Level I certified coach
1. They have a very strong base of 4-6 months of consistent training
2. They have a strong swim or run background
3. They have trained for at least 10-12 hours per week
This program is an advanced plan to bridge you from an a Half Ironman to Ironman using a power meter with the confidence that you can complete the race without difficulty.
The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. The maximum volume is around 14-20 hours pretty consistently and some of the easier weeks are around 9 hours.
Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 3,000 yards. You should be able to bike at least 3.5 hours and be able to run three times per week with at least one of the runs being 90 minutes. If you are a weak swimmer or runner, you can certainly do the best you can on your weaker events but its best if you are already up to the base fitness levels suggested.
1. They have a very strong base of 4-6 months of consistent training
2. They have a strong swim or run background
3. They have trained for at least 10-12 hours per week
This program is an advanced plan to bridge you from an Olympic Distance triathlon to a Half Ironman using a power meter with the confidence that you can complete the race without difficulty.
The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. The maximum volume is around 11 hours pretty consistently and some of the easier weeks are around 6 hours.
Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 2,000 yards. You should be able to bike at least 2 hours and be able to run three times per week with at least one of the runs being 60 minutes. If you are a weak swimmer or runner, you can certainly do the best you can on your weaker events but its best if you are already up to the base fitness levels suggested.
by Ben Greenfield 0 weeks $99.00
Written by triathlon coach, physiologist and nutritionist Ben Greenfield (from http://www.bengreenfieldfitness.com), this plan also includes complete instructions for incorporating nutrition supplements and ergogenic aids, as well as tips and tricks for fat loss and sports performance enhancement. It is written with the "real person" in mind, utilizing foods and supplements that you can easily find without making special trips to an organic food store or website.
In the nutrition plan detailed description file, you are also given exact instructions for how to tweak each aspect of the meal plan based on your customized needs. Perhaps most conveninetly, the plan features the new TrainingPeaks grocery list pod so YOU don't have to make a list! Just open up the grocery list, print for the number of weeks you want to stock up on food, and take to the grocery store with absolutely no guessing about quantities and ingredients!
Seamlessly integrate this nutrition plan into any of your TrainingPeaks training plans for ultimate success. **note: some browser may not show plan "preview" properly - there are actually detailed meals and recipes for every day in this plan!**
by Dr Jeff Banas 11 weeks $47.95
Includes examples of daily meals and a complete list of approved foods and foods you should avoid.
Exercise Monday through Friday, off on Saturday, then a short workout on Sundays.
We combine cardio and strength sessions together a few times a week to maximize fat burning. For example: run, do a push ups, a squat, a burpee, then run again). You don’t need a gym membership or any special exercise equipment.
Many of the nutrition, supplement and exercise protocols list here are the same ones Dr Jeff used to lose over 60 pounds and turn from a 270 pound fatman to a 205 seven time Ironman Triathlon finisher.
If you have a question about your training, your diet, you nutrition, no problem, this plan includes a consultation with Dr Banas, just drop him an email and we will set up a time to talk.
This plan includes:
-A personal phone, or sky or email consultation with Dr Banas (www.DrJeffBanas.com)
-Detailed Supplement and nutritional protocols for Fat Loss, Hormone Support, Recovery, Race Day and Performance.
- Cold Thermogenesis Protocols for recovery and enhanced weight loss.
-Fasting protocols it increase fat loss and to train your body to burn fat as the primary fuel source. (There are more calories in fat than in carbs and you have plenty of fat on you to burn for fuel)
- Low Thyroid/Metabolism Support.
-What artificial sweeteners to avoid.
-How Poor Sleep can affect weight loss and performance.
-Detailed nutrition and supplement protocols.
-How to find, as use, your fat burning zone.
-Self assessment function movement screen to uncover muscle imbalances and weakness.
-Recovery and self myofasical release sessions.
-How Poor Sleep can affect weight loss and performance.
-Testosterone enhancing supplement protocols-Superhuman food pyramid
Advanced athletes train between 14 and 18 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Adv_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/half-ironman-advanced-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our Gold Level plans include all Silver Level resources and weekly Coach Podcasts to boost your learning & motivation!
Advanced athletes train between 14 and 18 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Adv_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description here:
Beginner athletes train between 10 and 14 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Beg_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/half-ironman-beginner-gold-level-20-weeks/
Beginner athletes train between 10 and 14 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Beg_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/half-ironman-beginner-gold-level-20-weeks/
Intermediate athletes train between 12 and 14 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Int_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description below: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/half-ironman-intermediate-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our Gold Level plans include all Silver Level resources and weekly Coach Podcasts to boost your learning & motivation!
Intermediate athletes train between 12 and 14 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/HIM_Int_Plan_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/half-ironman-intermediate-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Advanced athletes train between 14 and 18 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Adv_20_SC.png
> See the full description below: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-advanced-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Advanced athletes train between 14 and 18 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Adv_20_SC.png
> See the full description below: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-advanced-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Beginner athletes train between 12 and 16 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Beg_20_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-beginner-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Beginner athletes train between 12 and 16 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Beg_20_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-beginner-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Intermediate athletes train between 14 and 17 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Int_20_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-intermediate-gold-level-20-weeks/
Our training plans include extensive resources & materials to boost your learning & motivation!
Intermediate athletes train between 14 and 17 hours a week, with the biggest time in the final six weeks pre-race.
> Click here to view a sample week: http://www.endurancenation.us/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/IM_Int_20_SC.png
> See the full description here: http://www.endurancenation.us/shop/ironman-intermediate-gold-level-20-weeks/
This complete 24 week training plan for a Half-Ironman or 70.3 distance triathlon is designed for the beginner-intermediate triathlete.
by Ben Greenfield 25 weeks $199.00
This program is designed for ALL levels, because it includes specific testing sessions to identify your customized intensities for each workout. Are you a busy person who still wants to compete in Ironman? Then this Quality Over Quantity plan is for you, with just 8-12 hours of training per week, and detailed daily workouts written by Ben Greenfield. Each session is based on the concept that high intensity interval training results in superior endurance adaptations, compared to high volume training.
Written by USA Triathlon-certified coach and EPIC Tri Coach Michele Gay, this plan incorporates her experience coaching age-group triathletes from first timers to podium finishers and competing at all distances, being a podium finisher in both Olympic and 70.3 distances.
Starting 12 weeks before your target race, this plan is based on a linear periodization model with a 3 week build/1 week recovery schedule which stresses athletes, allowing for appropriate recovery for adaptation. It contains two build periods (max 11:40/week) prior to peaking (max 13:10/week) and tapering. Most weeks contains 2x strength/core , 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs including 1 BRICK workout.
During the plan, you will build up to: 1.2 miles swimming, 4 hours cycling and 2 hours running. Your plan has a designated off day (Sunday) which could be switched to accommodate different schedules. Use of a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort is encouraged but you may use power as well.
There is an optional, but highly recommended, Olympic Distance race planned at the end of the 6th week of training. If unable to participate in a race, a brick swim/bike/run, simulating a race is prescribed.
Included in the purchase of this plan is a Quick Start Guide, which explains how to use your training plan.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:,br>Swim: 1200 meters or yards continuously
Bike: 2 hours continuously,br>Run: 40 min continuously
Questions Visit us on the web at epictri.com or Email Michele at michele@epictri.com
The water is normally fairly warm. The bike features a 16 mile connector, two 40 mile loops and then a repeat of the connector. Small rolling hills and a couple of sustained climbs are included throughout the race. The run is a 2-loop course mostly through city streets and residential neighborhoods, featuring some modest climbing.
This plan includes a build and peak toward the Racine 70.3 race in late July before the final 7-weeks of Ironman Specific Preparation. Other races commonly attendend by midwestern athletes are also on the schedule as optional events.
by Dr Jeff Banas 20 weeks $47.95
This is part of the Fatman To Ironman Series by Dr Jeff Banas. Dr. Jeff Banas went from a 270 pound Fatman to a 205 pound 7 time Ironman Triathlon Finisher. This plan is part of the Fatman to Ironman Series that no only give you a new body, but also a new life!
This plan includes a 30min personal consultation Dr. Banas ($200.00 Value). You can discuss any questions you may have about the training, nutrition, supplements, etc.
Includes examples daily meals along with a food list on which foods you should eat and what foods you should avoid.
Nutrition advice is listed in the weekly goals. Every week you are give nutrition "Home Work" assignment that over time will allow you to change your bad nutrition habits and replace them with new ones
You only need to exercise about one hour during the week and maybe 1-2hrs on a weekend.
Training days are Monday to Thursday, Saturday and Sunday with Friday off.
This program includes detailed exercise sessions and videos that take all the guess work out of training.
This plan includes:
-Detailed Supplement and nutritional protocols for Fat Loss, Hormone Support, Recovery, Race Day and Performance.
-How to find you fat burning zone
- Cold Thermogenesis Protocols
-Fasting protocols it increase fat loss and to train your body to burn fat as the primary fuel source. (There are more calories in fat than in carbs and you have plenty of fat on you to burn for fuel)
- Low Thyroid/Metabolism Support
-What artificial sweeteners to avoid
-How Poor Sleep can affect weight loss and performance
-Detailed nutrition and supplement protocols.
-How to determine how many calories you need to take in to lose weight
-Includes Superhuman Food Pyramid
by Dr Jeff Banas 10 weeks $57.95
Dreams of Ironman? Why not start with a Sprint? That's what I did. I started with a Sprint race as a way to lose weight and get in shape and now I have done 7 Ironman’s. I never dreamed I would do that.
So let’s start getting you in shape.
This is part of the Fatman To Ironman Series by Dr Jeff Banas. Dr. Jeff Banas went from a 270 pound Fatman to a 205 pound 7 time Ironman Triathlon Finisher. This plan is part of the Fatman to Ironman Series that no only give you a new body, but also a new life!
This plan includes a 30min personal consultation Dr. Banas ($200.00 Value). You can discuss any questions you may have about the training, nutrition, supplements, etc
The focus of this plan is on weight loss and increasing testosterone level with supplements, and testosterone exercises and nutrition.
Are you ready for a new body, a new life? Nutrition advice is listed in the weekly goals. Every week you are give nutrition "Home Work" assignment that over time will allow you to change your bad nutrition habits and replace them with new ones.
If you are a beginner and looking to start doing triathlon as a way to get in shape and lose weight this plan is for you. You only need to exercise at the most, one hour during the week and maybe 1-2hrs on a weekend.
This program includes detailed exercise sessions and videos that take all the guess work out of training.
This 10 week plan can be used as a training plan to get you training for a sprint distance triathlon or it can be used as a weight loss and conditioning plan to help you lose weight and improve your fitness
The plan is set up for you to do about one hour of exercise Monday-Thursday. Friday off and then 1-2 hrs on Sat and Sunday.
Swim, bike and run sessions. Also strength sessions specific to improve your swim, bike and running. We also add some cardio sessions combined with strength session. Run a little, drop down and do a few push ups, burpees then run some more.
Specific exercise sessions to burn fat and increase testosterone levels.
This plan is for men and includes specific protocols on how to increase Testosterone Levels, reduce estrogen levels and lose body fat.
This plan includes:
-A personal phone, or sky or email consultation with Dr Banas (www.DrJeffBanas.com)
-Detailed Supplement and nutritional protocols for Fat Loss, Hormone Support, Recovery, Race Day and Performance.
- Cold Thermogenesis Protocols
-Fasting protocols it increase fat loss and to train your body to burn fat as the primary fuel source. (There are more calories in fat than in carbs and you have plenty of fat on you to burn for fuel)
- Low Thyroid/Metabolism Support
-What artificial sweeteners to avoid
-How Poor Sleep can affect weight loss and performance
-Detailed nutrition and supplement protocols.
-Includes specific nutrition and diet info on how many carbs and protein you should be taking to lose weight and increase your body's testosterone level naturally.
-Testosterone enhancing diet and exercise program.
-Cutting edge weight loss and recovery protocols.
-How to find, as use, your fat burning zone.
-How many calories you should be taking in.
-Examples of daily meals and a food list on which foods you should be eating and which foods you should avoid
1.2 mile Swim | 56 mile Bike | 13.1 mile Run
This training plan is written to prepare you to finish your first Half Ironman. The weekly volume per week starts at 8 hours and will gradually move up to 12-14. You should already be consistently training 8-10 hours per week before starting this plan and ideally you should have completed some Olympic distance races in the past season
This plan is based on an annual volume of 500 hours per year, which won't necessarily mean an average of 10 hours per week. It will build to 14+ with recovery weeks at around 8 hours per week.
While it’s definitely possible to finish a Half Ironman Triathlon with fewer hours per week or fewer days per week than what you see here, I wanted to present a plan which emphasizes consistent buildup of hours to make your race day more enjoyable and less of a day of Swim-Bike-Walk.
I realize that every athlete has specific strengths, weaknesses, available hours, and other restrictions. Hopefully, you can adjust this plan to fit you well enough.
You should be able to do the following prior to starting this plan
swim 2x1500 per week
bike 90 mins
run 60 mins
by Hypercat Racing, Rachel Sears Casanta 24 weeks $249.99
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
The plan starts at 5 hours per week, and builds to an average 9 hours a week with a max of 10 hours a week.
This plan uses heart rate zones and perceived effort for pacing and effort level.
This plan uses heart rate zones and perceived effort for pacing and effort level.
When you purchase the plan The Coach will contact you directly! Your coach will discuss your goals, your training history, your racing history and your life schedule. The coach will then build a 20 week training program specifically for you. Even better your coach will be available to answer email questions throughout your entire training cycle and then personally help you with your "A" race plan.
The Program also Includes:
FREE Training consultation
Free 3 Workout DVD's Strength, Core and Yoga ($36.00 Value)
Free Team Tech Tee ($18.00 value)
Free Training Peaks Log
$25.00 Hammer Nutrition Gift Certificate (plus 15% discount through our affiliate program)
50% discount on all Zensah Compression products (minimum $15.00 value discount code provided at purchase)
30% discount on all Polar Heart Rate Monitors (minimum $24.00 value)
20% discount on 1BandID ($3.80 value discount code provided at purchase)
Our training packages are custom designed for the individual runners and triathletes! . They can be purchased now and used later to coordinate with your "A" race.
**New Clients Only
by Craig Zelent 20 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 20 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 8 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for the EXPERIENCED Half Ironman distance triathlete, the primary goal of this 8-week BASE PERIOD training plan is to set you up for success in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
This plan progresses through two 4-week base periods (12 hrs max per week) with each week containing 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3 hrs biking and 1.75 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 8 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 8-week BASE BUILDING training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
This plan progresses through two 4-week base periods and one build period (11 hrs max per week). Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 2.5 hrs biking and 1.5 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Believe. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and exercise physiologist David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@endurnaceworks.net.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
This plan assumes that you have completed one of my Base modules and have established your endurance.
While the average training load is 11 hours per week, this plan is challenging because the key workouts are very specific to your needs as a Half Ironman athlete. Where appropriate, I have explained how experienced athletes can beef up the plan a bit.
Strength training is not emphasized but I have placed one strength session per week into the plan. This session falls on Monday in the first 6 weeks of the plan and Wednesday in the second 6 weeks of the plan. Within my own training I would use two session per week until the until the final two weeks of the plan. If you want to place a second strength session then the combo that fits best is Monday/Friday (first 6 weeks) and Wednesday/Sunday (next 4 weeks)
There is an important Half Ironman simulation workout that falls six weeks out from your goal race. You can substitute a B-, or C-, priority event for this race. An Olympic Distance race would be the most appropriate choice. If you are new to Half Ironman racing then, I believe, you will get the most benefit from following my race simulation workout that weekend.
The swimming program is focused on distance freestyle improvement with main set distance capped around 3000 meters (3300 yards). Where appropriate, I have explained how to dial the program up, or down.
The plan is appropriate for athletes racing all distances with weekly volume ranging from 8 to 13 hours per week.
Swim - up to 3,300 yards / 3,000 meters
Bike - up to 40 miles / 65 kilometers
Run - up to 10 miles / 16 kilometers
I hope you enjoy,
gordo
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for EXPERIENCED triathletes who have completed multiple Half Ironman races, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to prepare you to EXCEL in YOUR Half Ironman on race day
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (6-7.5 hrs per week) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 45 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $97.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through one base period and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards
- Bike: 120 min
- Run: 80 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $117.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through two base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $137.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your goal race, this plan progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards
- Bike: 90 min
- Run: 60 min
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Saturday. If your race is on Sunday, please select our "Sunday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
by David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $157.00
Commit. Train. Perspire. Overcome. Achieve.
When you cross the finish line of an Ironman 70.3® or other half triathlon, you've accomplished something very special.
Designed for NOVICE to INTERMEDIATE age group triathletes with full time jobs, the primary goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR SUCCESSFUL Half Ironman FINISH on race day.
Crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MSE, MS, CSCS, this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, his experience from dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your goal race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (13.5 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. You will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your long ride is Saturday, long run is Sunday and off day is Monday. Although not necessary, we recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort; you may use a power meter as well.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 300 meters or yards
- Bike: 60 min
- Run: 40 min (run/walk)
Purchase of this plan includes our comprehensive 40+ page Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan plus email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at schooloftri.com or email David directly at: david@schooloftricom.
Please note:
- This plan starts any time and you can set it to end on race day.
- This plan version assumes your target race is on a Sunday. If your race is on Saturday, please select our "Saturday Race" plan.
- Ironman 70.3® and Ironman Triathlon® are registered trademarks of World Triathlon Corporation (WTC).
1.2 mile Swim | 56 mile Bike | 13.1 mile Run
This training plan is written to prepare you to finish your first Half Ironman. The weekly volume per week starts at 8 hours and will gradually move up to 12-14. You should already be consistently training 8-10 hours per week before starting this plan and ideally you should have completed some Olympic distance races in the past season
This plan is based on an annual volume of 500 hours per year, which won't necessarily mean an average of 10 hours per week. It will build to 14+ with recovery weeks at around 8 hours per week.
While it’s definitely possible to finish a Half Ironman Triathlon with fewer hours per week or fewer days per week than what you see here, I wanted to present a plan which emphasizes consistent buildup of hours to make your race day more enjoyable and less of a day of Swim-Bike-Walk.
I realize that every athlete has specific strengths, weaknesses, available hours, and other restrictions. Hopefully, you can adjust this plan to fit you well enough.
The weekly volume per week will gradually move up to 12-14. You should already be consistently training 8-12 hours per week before starting this plan and ideally you should have completed some Olympic distance races in the past season
This plan is based on an annual volume of 500 hours per year, an average of 10 hours per week. It will build to 12+ with recovery weeks at around 8 hours per week.
Author: Coach Erik Seedhouse, M.Med.Sc., Ph.D., FBIS, Coaching Director, TriathlonPro
9 weeks - $49.95
Total Hours: 88.2
This is an Advanced level Half Ironman distance training schedule aimed at the competitive Age
Group triathlete with more than 5 years training/racing experience and with at least three Half
Ironman distance races completed. This schedule has been used dozens of times by athletes and
has resulted in more than a dozen age group podium results.
Before starting this schedule it is recommended that the athlete have logged between 4 to 6
weeks of base aerobic training. Ideally, the athlete should also have completed two or three
shorter races to activate their race legs. This schedule is moderately low volume but high in
intensity so it requires a high level of conditioning and efficient swim, bike and run
biomechanics. Due to the moderately high intensity of this schedule, monitoring for signs of
overtraining is essential. It is therefore recommended that serious athletes work with a coach to
properly develop their potential.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, the key to this training schedule is quality, quality,
quality! In short, you will be training as you race. You will find this schedule may be lightweight
in terms of volume but it’s the intensity that counts. This schedule has been used by athletes
(including the coach who developed it) to race sub 4:30 in Half Ironman races – it is race-proven.
Every week includes one day recovery. Most weekdays involve moderate training loads
requiring time commitments of between one to three hours. Weekends have higher workloads
and max out at 4 to 5 hours of weekend training.
Intensity descriptions are by Target Training Zones (TTZs) but athletes are encouraged to use
heart rate, wattage and/or perceived effort to monitor their training.
TTZs are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Usually restricted to taper sessions and post-race recovery.
Zone 2: Aerobic pace. Low to moderate intensity. Able to maintain a conversation. Heart Rate is
at least 15 to 25 beats per minute below lactate threshold heart rate.
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance. Steady to moderate effort. Heart Rate is between 0 to 10 beats
below lactate threshold heart rate.
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard effort sustainable for short duration. This is race effort so
you’ll be suffering. Heart Rate within 5 beats of LTHR
Prior to starting this schedule it is suggested the athlete perform a maximal oxygen uptake test
(VO2max); this will ensure optimal determination of your TTZs. One option is the shuttle run (‘bleep test’) or a direct assessment in a sport science lab. If neither of those tests are available a
20 minute functional threshold (run) test can be used to determine LTHR. For example, if you
run flat out for 5km and you heart rate at the finish is 160 bpm, this is your LTHR.
This 9-week training schedule will ensure you are optimally prepared to race a fast Half
Ironman.
TriathlonPro wishes you luck with your training and racing and thanks you for using this training
plan. If you are interested in personalized training/coaching please contact Erik at
triathlonpro@hotmail.com.
Train smart,
Erik Seedhouse, Ph.D
www.triathlonpro.net
This plan is best started about 23 weeks prior to your first A race of the season. This plan is quite detailed, often including alternative workouts, yet easy to follow.
To start this plan you should be able to swim 1 hour, bike 1.5 hours, and run 1 hour. Over 12 weeks you will increase your weekly volume from about 9.5 hours to 14 hours including 3 swims, 2 to 4 bikes, 3 to 4 runs, and 1 to 2 strength workouts each week. The exceptions are the R&R weeks every third week with volume significantly reduced for 4 to 5 days and self-testing at the end of the week to measure progress.
The plan uses common tri language to describe the workouts and is easy to follow. By the end of 12 weeks you will have excellent Base fitness and be ready to start the Build period 11 weeks prior to your A-priority, half-Ironman race.
(For detailed description of how to set your zones for heart rate, power or pace go to http://tinyurl.com/29t3q6m and click on USING HR, POWER AND PACE (PDF) under my picture.)
This plan is intended for the under-age-50 triathlete who has been racing for two or more years but may also be used by older athletes who recover well within 48 hours after hard or long workouts and can train with 3 consecutive weeks of quality training before taking a recovery period. To start this plan you should be able to swim 1 hour, bike 1.5 hours, and run 1 hour. Over 12 weeks you will increase your weekly volume from about 13 hours to 19 hours including 4-5 swims, 4 to 6 bikes, 4 to 6 runs, and 1 to 2 strength workouts each week. The exceptions are the R&R weeks every fourth week with volume significantly reduced for 4 to 5 days and self-testing at the end of the week to measure progress.
The plan uses common language to describe the workouts and is easy to follow. By the end of 12 weeks you will have excellent Base fitness and be ready to start the Build period 11 weeks prior to your A-priority, half-Ironman race.
(For detailed description of how to set your zones for heart rate, power or pace go to http://tinyurl.com/29t3q6m and click on USING HR, POWER AND PACE (PDF) under my picture.)
This plan is intended for the experienced, intermediate to advanced triathlete. To start this plan you should have completed a Base training period and be able to swim 1 hour, bike 3 hours, and run 2 hours in separate workouts. Weekly volume is about 13 hours per week with 3-4 swims, 4 bikes, 4-5 runs and 1 strength session. The exceptions are the R&R weeks every third week with volume significantly reduced for 4 to 5 days and self-testing at the end of the week to measure progress. There are also fitness-building race-simulation bricks every week. The last 3 weeks of this plan taper and peak you for the race.
The plan uses common language to describe the workouts and is easy to follow. By the end of 11 weeks you will have excellent half Ironman race fitness.
(For detailed description of how to set your zones for heart rate, power or pace go to http://tinyurl.com/29t3q6m and click on USING HR, POWER AND PACE (PDF) under my picture.)
This plan is intended for the experienced, intermediate to advanced under-age-50 triathlete. To start this plan you should have completed a Base training period and be able to swim 1 hour, bike 3 hours, and run 2 hours. Weekly volume is about 13 hours per week with 3-4 swims, 4 bikes, 4-5 runs and 1 strength session. The exceptions are the R&R weeks every fourth week with volume significantly reduced for 4 to 5 days and self-testing at the end of the week to measure progress. There are also fitness-building race-simulation bricks every week. The last 3 weeks of this plan taper and peak you for the race.
The plan uses common triathlon language to describe the workouts and is easy to follow. By the end of 11 weeks you will have excellent half Ironman race fitness.
This plan is intended for the under-age-50 triathlete who has been racing for two or more years but may also be used by older athletes who recover well within 48 hours and can train with 3 weeks of quality before taking a recovery period of 5 days. To start this plan you should be able to swim 1 hour, bike 3 hours, and run 2 hours. Except for the R&R weeks which are about 9 hours, the Build training weeks are around 16 hours. Optional strength maintenance workouts are included as suggested in The Triathlete's Training Bible.
The plan uses common triathlon language to describe the workouts and is easy to follow as you may see by clicking the plan preview above. By the end of 11 weeks you will have excellent fitness and be ready for your A-priority, half-Ironman race.
The plan is 20 weeks long. It begins with an 8-week base phase, followed by a 6-week build phase and a 6-week peak phase. Odd-numbered training weeks include 3 swims, 3 rides, and 3 runs. Weeks 2, 6 and so forth include 3 swims, 2 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. Weeks 4, 8 and so forth include 3 swims, 3 rides, 2 runs, and a bike-run brick.
Every fourth week is a recovery week. Optional tune-up triathlons are scheduled in Week 12 (sprint) and Week 16 (Olympic distance). The final 10 days of each plan constitute a tapering period.
The plan begins with 3,900 yards of swimming, 2 hours and 45 minutes of cycling, and 1 hour and 45 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 6,700 yards of swimming, 5 hours and 20 minutes of cycling, and 3 hours and 7 minutes of running in Week 17.
The plan is 20 weeks long and comprise an 8-week base phase, a 6-week build phase, and a 6-week peak phase. It includes two optional tune-up races: a sprint at the end of Week 12 and an Olympic distance race at the end of Week 16. Every fourth week is a recovery week and the last 10 days constitute a tapering period.
You will train 4 times per week in each discipline. This includes a weekly bike-run brick workout. The brick falls on Thursday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks.
The Level 10 plan begins with 8,500 yards of swimming, 6 hours and 15 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 56 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 12,850 yards of swimming, 10 hours and 10 minutes of cycling, and 4 hours and 55 minutes of running in Week 17.
The plan is 20 weeks long. It begins with an 8-week base phase, followed by a 6-week build phase and a 6-week peak phase. Odd-numbered training weeks include 3 swims, 3 rides, and 3 runs. Weeks 2, 6 and so forth include 3 swims, 2 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. Weeks 4, 8 and so forth include 3 swims, 3 rides, 2 runs, and a bike-run brick.
Every fourth week is a recovery week. Optional tune-up triathlons are scheduled in Week 12 (sprint) and Week 16 (Olympic distance). The final 10 days of each plan constitute a tapering period.
The Level 2 plan begins with 4,300 yards of swimming, 3 hours and 5 minutes of cycling, and 1 hour and 55 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 6,700 yards of swimming, 5 hours and 55 minutes of cycling, and 3 hours and 19 minutes of running in Week 17.
Ironman finish in 20 weeks. Choose this plan if you are starting with a decent level of triathlon fitness but you want to follow a training plan with a manageable schedule of 9 workouts per week.
The Level 3 plan is 20 weeks long. It begins with an 8-week base phase, followed by a 6-week build phase and a 6-week peak phase. Odd-numbered training weeks include 3 swims, 3 rides, and 3 runs. Weeks 2, 6 and so forth include 3 swims, 2 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. Weeks 4, 8 and so forth include 3 swims, 3 rides, 2 runs, and a bike-run brick.
Every fourth week is a recovery week. Optional tune-up triathlons are scheduled in Week 12 (sprint) and Week 16 (Olympic distance). The final 10 days of each plan constitute a tapering period.
The Level 3 plan begins with 4,500 yards of swimming, 3 hours and 30 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours of running in Week 1. It peaks with 7,550 yards of swimming, 6 hours and 30 minutes of cycling, and 3 hours and 36 minutes of running in Week 17.
Ironman finish in 20 weeks. It will be a good fit for you if your half-Ironman goal is more ambitious than just finishing, yet time efficiency is very important to you in your training.
The Level 3 plan is 20 weeks long. It begins with an 8-week base phase, followed by a 6-week build phase and a 6-week peak phase. Odd-numbered training weeks include 3 swims, 3 rides, and 3 runs. Weeks 2, 6 and so forth include 3 swims, 2 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. Weeks 4, 8 and so forth include 3 swims, 3 rides, 2 runs, and a bike-run brick.
Every fourth week is a recovery week. Optional tune-up triathlons are scheduled in Week 12 (sprint) and Week 16 (Olympic distance). The final 10 days of each plan constitute a tapering period.
The Level 4 plan begins with 4,900 yards of swimming, 3 hours 55 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 15 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 8,000 yards of swimming, 7 hours and 5 minutes of cycling, and 3 hours and 53 minutes of running in Week 17.
The Level 5 plan is 20 weeks long and comprises an 8-week base phase and 6-week build and peak phases. A typical training week includes 3 swims, 3 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. The brick workouts fall on Wednesday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks. Every fourth week is a recovery week. The final 10 days of the plan constitute a taper period.
Two tune-up races are scheduled. A sprint race is schedule in Week 12 and an Olympic distance race in Week 16. If you are unable to find opportunities for tune-up races you will do additional brick workouts instead.
The plan begins with 4,500 yards of swimming, 4 hours and 15 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 10 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 7,400 yards of swimming, 7 hours and 50 minutes of cycling, and 3 hours and 38 minutes of running in Week 17.
The Level 6 plan is 20 weeks long and comprises an 8-week base phase and 6-week build and peak phases. A typical training week includes 3 swims, 3 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. The brick workouts fall on Wednesday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks. Every fourth week is a recovery week. The final 10 days of the plan constitute a taper period.
Two tune-up races are scheduled. A sprint race is schedule in Week 12 and an Olympic distance race in Week 16. If you are unable to find opportunities for tune-up races you will do additional brick workouts instead.
The Level 6 plan begins with 5,200 yards of swimming, 4 hours and 40 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 23 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 8,000 yards of swimming, 8 hours and 25 minutes of cycling, and 4 hours and 3 minutes of running in Week 17.
The Level 7 plan is 20 weeks long and comprises an 8-week base phase and 6-week build and peak phases. A typical training week includes 3 swims, 3 rides, 3 runs, and a bike-run brick workout. The brick workouts fall on Wednesday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks. Every fourth week is a recovery week. The final 10 days of the plan constitute a taper period.
Two tune-up races are scheduled. A sprint race is schedule in Week 12 and an Olympic distance race in Week 16. If you are unable to find opportunities for tune-up races you will do additional brick workouts instead.
The Level 7 plan begins with 5,900 yards of swimming, 4 hours and 55 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 31 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 8,650 yards of swimming, 9 hours of cycling, and 4 hours and 18 minutes of running in Week 17.
The plan is 20 weeks long and comprise an 8-week base phase, a 6-week build phase, and a 6-week peak phase. It includes two optional tune-up races: a sprint at the end of Week 12 and an Olympic distance race at the end of Week 16. Every fourth week is a recovery week and the last 10 days constitute a tapering period.
You will train 4 times per week in each discipline. This includes a weekly bike-run brick workout. The brick falls on Thursday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks.
The Level 8 plan begins with 7,550 yards of swimming, 5 hours and 15 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 31 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 11,850 yards of swimming, 9 hours and 5 minutes of cycling, and 4 hours and 21 minutes of running in Week 17.
The plan is 20 weeks long and comprise an 8-week base phase, a 6-week build phase, and a 6-week peak phase. It includes two optional tune-up races: a sprint at the end of Week 12 and an Olympic distance race at the end of Week 16. Every fourth week is a recovery week and the last 10 days constitute a tapering period.
You will train 4 times per week in each discipline. This includes a weekly bike-run brick workout. The brick falls on Thursday in odd-numbered weeks and on Saturday in even-numbered weeks.
The Level 9 plan begins with 8,050 yards of swimming, 5 hours and 45 minutes of cycling, and 2 hours and 46 minutes of running in Week 1. It peaks with 12,250 yards of swimming, 9 hours and 30 minutes of cycling, and 4 hours and 48 minutes of running in Week 17.
This program should be used for an athlete who has:
1. A very strong base of 4-6 months of consistent training
2. A strong swim or run background
3. Has trained for at least 10-12 hours per week
This program is an intermediate to advanced plan to train you for a Half Ironman with power.
The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. The maximum volume is around 13-15 hours pretty consistently and some of the easier weeks are around 10 hours.
Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 2,000 yards. You should be able to bike at least 2 hours and be able to run for 60 minutes.
by Mike Ricci, USA Triathlon Elite Coach 16 weeks $199.00
16 Week Half Ironman with Power
This program should be used for an athlete who has:
1. A very strong base of 4-6 months of consistent training
2. A strong swim or run background
3. Has trained for at least 10-12 hours per week
This program is an intermediate to advanced plan to train you for a Half Ironman with power.
The schedule consists of 3-4 workouts per week in each sport, 1-2 days of strength training and core work too. The maximum volume is around 13-15 hours pretty consistently and some of the easier weeks are around 10 hours.
Requirements: You should be able to swim at least 2,000 yards. You should be able to bike at least 2 hours and be able to run for 60 minutes.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Half Ironman (70.3) competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 21 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
The plan features an initial transition week to prepare the athlete for the two 3-week blocks of heavy race-specific training and a 3-week taper.
Plan is based on a 2 week training period followed by a 3-4 day rest period to maximize training time and allow for body adaptation to training stress.
Plan also includes periodic time trials in the bike/swim/run in order to establish and re-establish valid heart rate zones in the bike and run. Pacing is used in swim workouts and based off of a 1000 meter time trial.
Focus is on building sport specific endurance and force/efficiency/technique in the first 8 weeks of training. During this period you will complete:
* 2 strength/stability sessions per week in gym, .
* Progressively longer workouts in the bike/swim/run.
* Workouts focusing on form/efficiency/technique in all disciplines.
Plan then transitions you to a base/build phase in the next 8 weeks to consolidate and build muscular endurance. During this phase of training athletes will complete:
* Weekly interval/tempo sessions for the bike/swim/run which increase in intensity.
* Endurance in all disciplines is maintained but not focused on like in the first 8 weeks.
* Strength sessions continue.
The final 6-8 weeks of training are focused on race specific workouts.
* Brick workouts are scheduled on a more regular basis and increase in duration.
* Open water swim workouts become more frequent.
* Muscular endurance and force are maintained through weekly interval and tempo sessions in all disciplines.
* Strength workouts are discontinued in order to allow strength gains in the gym to carry over to the bike/run/swim.
Final 2 week peak is included and leads you into your race.
PURPOSE: This is a beginner level Ironman Distance training plan intended for use by the age group triathlete with at least one season of triathlon racing experience but with no Ironman distance experience. Training time ranges from 9 hours per week up to around 18 hours of weekly training during 'peak' volume. The goal for the plan is to help the athlete build confidence and the basic skills and fitness necessary to finish the race in a reasonable time comfortably and uninjured while having a meaning Ironman day race experience! After completing this plan, progressing to the Advanced Plan will help take your performance to the next level.
Before starting this plan, it's recommended that the athlete complete at least 12 weeks of steady aerobic foundation training and perhaps have completed one or two races in order to establish their 'race legs'. This beginner program requires a moderate level of overall body conditioning and good biomechanics due to the high volume during peak weeks. It is expected that the athlete takes full responsibility for monitoring themselves for signs of overtraining or overuse and adjust the plan according to their own individual needs. A complete physical check up is recommended prior to starting this or any strenuous exercise program. Finally, it's important for all athletes to understand that successful triathlon racing requires a year-round commitment to training and it is advised that serious competitors work with a coach in regard to their annual training plan development.
The daily workouts in the plan are detailed with small ranges in order to accommodate individual time restraints. For example, a run workout might suggest 40-45 minutes of zone 2 (aerobic paced) running and a target distance of 5 miles. It is up to the athlete to hit daily training goals and to log them accordingly in the trainingpeaks software.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, most weekdays involve lighter training loads of one or two workouts a day and involve a time commitment of one to two hours (or slightly more) depending on which stage of the plan the athlete is in. Weekends typically have higher workloads and 'peak' at upwards of 8-10 hours of total training.
At times during the plan, Spinervals DVDs are recommended for use but are not required. Athletes can learn more about the Spinervals DVD series by visiting www.spinervals.com Also, training tips are available to everyone by visiting www.coachtroy.com
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 6-7.5 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
By the end of this 16 week block of training, the athlete should have a high level of fitness required for the successful completion of the Ironman distance. More information, videos and articles about training and racing can be found online at www.coachtroy.com, with a bulk of articles available to members of the website.
We wish you luck with your training and racing this season and thank you for using this training plan and our other services. Please note that we also offer training camps and personal coaching and training plan development too as found at www.coachtroy.com. If you have any questions, please contact us at info@coachtroy.com
Train smart,
Coach Troy Jacobson
Official Coach of IRONMAN
www.coachtroy.com
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $369.95
PURPOSE: This is a beginner level Ironman Distance training plan intended for use by the age group triathlete with at least one season of triathlon racing experience but with no Ironman distance experience. Training time ranges from 9 hours per week up to around 18 hours of weekly training during 'peak' volume. The goal for the plan is to help the athlete build confidence and the basic skills and fitness necessary to finish the race in a reasonable time comfortably and uninjured while having a meaning Ironman day race experience! After completing this plan, progressing to the Advanced Plan will help take your performance to the next level.
Before starting this plan, it's recommended that the athlete complete at least 12 weeks of steady aerobic foundation training and perhaps have completed one or two races in order to establish their 'race legs'. This beginner program requires a moderate level of overall body conditioning and good biomechanics due to the high volume during peak weeks. It is expected that the athlete takes full responsibility for monitoring themselves for signs of overtraining or overuse and adjust the plan according to their own individual needs. A complete physical check up is recommended prior to starting this or any strenuous exercise program. Finally, it's important for all athletes to understand that successful triathlon racing requires a year-round commitment to training and it is advised that serious competitors work with a coach in regard to their annual training plan development.
The daily workouts in the plan are detailed with small ranges in order to accommodate individual time restraints. For example, a run workout might suggest 40-45 minutes of zone 2 (aerobic paced) running and a target distance of 5 miles. It is up to the athlete to hit daily training goals and to log them accordingly in the trainingpeaks software.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, most weekdays involve lighter training loads of one or two workouts a day and involve a time commitment of one to two hours (or slightly more) depending on which stage of the plan the athlete is in. Weekends typically have higher workloads and 'peak' at upwards of 8-10 hours of total training.
At times during the plan, Spinervals DVDs are recommended for use but are not required. Athletes can learn more about the Spinervals DVD series by visiting www.spinervals.com Also, training tips are available to everyone by visiting www.coachtroy.com
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 6-7.5 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
By the end of this 16 week block of training, the athlete should have a high level of fitness required for the successful completion of the Ironman distance. More information, videos and articles about training and racing can be found online at www.coachtroy.com, with a bulk of articles available to members of the website.
We wish you luck with your training and racing this season and thank you for using this training plan and our other services. Please note that we also offer training camps and personal coaching and training plan development too as found at www.coachtroy.com. If you have any questions, please contact us at info@coachtroy.com
Train smart,
Coach Troy Jacobson
Official Coach of IRONMAN
www.coachtroy.com
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $119.95
The daily workouts in the plan are detailed with small ranges in order to accommodate individual time restraints. For example, a run workout might suggest 40-45 minutes of zone 2 (aerobic paced) running and a target distance of 5 miles. It is up to the athlete to hit daily training goals and to log them accordingly in the trainingpeaks software.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, most weekdays involve lighter training loads of one or two workouts a day and involve a time commitment of one to two hours (or slightly more) depending on which stage of the plan the athlete is in. Weekends typically have higher workloads and 'peak' at upwards of 8-10 hours of total training.
At times during the plan, Spinervals DVDs are recommended for use but are not required. Athletes can learn more about the Spinervals DVD series by visiting www.spinervals.com Also, training tips are available to everyone by visiting www.coachtroy.com
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 6-7.5 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
By the end of this 16 week block of training, the athlete should have a high level of fitness required for the successful completion of the Ironman distance. More information, videos and articles about training and racing can be found online at www.coachtroy.com, with a bulk of articles available to members of the website.
We wish you luck with your training and racing this season and thank you for using this training plan and our other services. Please note that we also offer training camps and personal coaching and training plan development too as found at www.coachtroy.com. If you have any questions, please contact us at info@coachtroy.com
Train smart,
Coach Troy Jacobson
Official Coach of IRONMAN
www.coachtroy.com
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $119.95
The daily workouts in the plan are detailed with small ranges in order to accommodate individual time restraints. For example, a run workout might suggest 40-45 minutes of zone 2 (aerobic paced) running and a target distance of 5 miles. It is up to the athlete to hit daily training goals and to log them accordingly in the trainingpeaks software.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, most weekdays involve lighter training loads of one or two workouts a day and involve a time commitment of one to two hours (or slightly more) depending on which stage of the plan the athlete is in. Weekends typically have higher workloads and 'peak' at upwards of 8-10 hours of total training.
At times during the plan, Spinervals DVDs are recommended for use but are not required. Athletes can learn more about the Spinervals DVD series by visiting www.spinervals.com Also, training tips are available to everyone by visiting www.coachtroy.com
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 6-7.5 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
By the end of this 16 week block of training, the athlete should have a high level of fitness required for the successful completion of the Ironman distance. More information, videos and articles about training and racing can be found online at www.coachtroy.com, with a bulk of articles available to members of the website.
We wish you luck with your training and racing this season and thank you for using this training plan and our other services. Please note that we also offer training camps and personal coaching and training plan development too as found at www.coachtroy.com. If you have any questions, please contact us at info@coachtroy.com
Train smart,
Coach Troy Jacobson
Official Coach of IRONMAN
www.coachtroy.com
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $369.95
PURPOSE: This is an Intermediate - Advanced level Ironman distance focused training plan intended for use by the competitive Ironman Age Group Triathlete with at least 3 years or more of training and racing experience and with at least one Ironman distance race 'under their belt'. Before starting this plan, it's recommended that the athlete complete at least 12 weeks of steady aerobic foundation training and perhaps have completed one or two races in order to establish their 'race legs'. In addition, this advanced program requires a high level of overall body conditioning and good biomechanics due to the high volume. It is expected that the athlete takes full responsibility for monitoring themselves for signs of overtraining or overuse and adjust the plan according to their own individual needs. A complete physical check up is recommended prior to starting this or any strenuous exercise program. Finally, it's important for all athletes to understand that successful triathlon racing requires a year-round commitment to training and it is advised that serious competitors work with a coach in regard to their annual training plan development.
The daily workouts in the plan are detailed with small ranges in order to accommodate individual time restraints. For example, a run workout might suggest 40-45 minutes of zone 2 (aerobic paced) running and a target distance of 5 miles. It is up to the athlete to hit daily training goals and to log them accordingly in the trainingpeaks software.
With the busy age group athlete in mind, most weekdays involve lighter training loads of one or two workouts a day and involve a time commitment of one to two hours (or slightly more) depending on which stage of the plan the athlete is in. Weekends typically have higher workloads and 'peak' at upwards of 8-10 hours of total training.
At times during the plan, Spinervals DVDs are recommended for use but are not required. Athletes can learn more about the Spinervals DVD series by visiting www.spinervals.com Also, training tips are available to everyone by visiting www.coachtroy.com
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 6-7.5 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
By the end of this 16 week block of training, the athlete should have a high level of fitness required for the successful completion of the Ironman distance. More information, videos and articles about training and racing can be found online at www.coachtroy.com, with a bulk of articles available to members of the website.
We wish you luck with your training and racing this season and thank you for using this training plan and our other services. Please note that we also offer training camps and personal coaching and training plan development too as found at www.coachtroy.com. If you have any questions, please contact us at info@coachtroy.com
Train smart,
Coach Troy Jacobson
Official Coach of IRONMAN
www.coachtroy.com
by Craig Zelent 20 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Craig Zelent 20 weeks $129.00
This plan is perfect for the 1st time Ironman competitor. This is also ideal for those who want to train by feel as heart rate and power tools are not utilized. This is very practical for those who have real lives - 1 day per week is always scheduled as an off day from training.
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $119.95
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 7-8 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
Success in this and all programs is dependent on your consistency and focus on other variables including nutrition, recovery and your overall health. Try to maximize each of these for best results.
If you have any questions, please contact us for immediate attention at info@coachtroy.com. And for more information, visit www.coachtroy.com
Thank you.
by Troy Jacobson 16 weeks $119.95
The workouts are given an intensity description by Zones. Advanced athletes can use heart rate, power (on the bike) or PE(perceived effort) to monitor their daily training intensities. In general, the intensities for this plan are as follows:
Zone 1: Recovery pace. Very low intensity active recovery 'shake the legs out'. Ideal after long/hard workout days and races. 'Noodle it'.
Zone 2: Aerobic/Blue pace. Low to moderate intensity training. PE of 7-8 (Scale 1-10, 10 being 100%). Steady conversation effort. HR is at least 10-25 beats per minute below LTHR (lactate threshold heart rate).
Zone 3: Aerobic Endurance/Gray pace. Moderate to hard training. PE of 7.5- 8.5. Harder efforts that can be sustained for long periods of time. HR 0-10 beats below LTHR
Zone 4: Threshold Training. Hard training at a pace sustainable for short durations. At and above 'race pace'. PE 8.5 - 9. Suffer a little. HR within 5+/- LTHR
Zone 5: V02max Training: Really hard training, PE 9-10. Suffer a lot. HR 10-20 bpm above LTHR
Prior to starting this program and again mid-way through the program, it is recommended that the athlete gets a metabolic test in order to set up target training zones effectively. If that test is not available or convenient, benchmark tests such as that found in Spinervals 27.0 (http://www.spinervals.com/products/item10.cfm), a 20 minute functional threshold test or for the run, a hard 3 mile effort (take avg. HR for the run) can be used to determine LTHR. (Example: If a 3 mile hard, race paced run yields an avg. HR of 150 bpm, this is your LTHR.)
Success in this and all programs is dependent on your consistency and focus on other variables including nutrition, recovery and your overall health. Try to maximize each of these for best results.
If you have any questions, please contact us for immediate attention at info@coachtroy.com. And for more information, visit www.coachtroy.com
Thank you.
This pland covers the final 12 wek specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Augusta SUCCESS on September 29, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Augusta SUCCESS on September 29, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Augusta SUCCESS on September 29, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Augusta SUCCESS on September 29, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austin SUCCESS on October 27, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austin SUCCESS on October 27, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austin SUCCESS on October 27, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austin SUCCESS on October 27, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austria SUCCESS on May 26, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austria SUCCESS on May 26, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austria SUCCESS on May 26, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Austria SUCCESS on May 26, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boise SUCCESS on June 8, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well. This program may be set to start or end at any time.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boise SUCCESS on June 8, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boise SUCCESS on June 8, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boise SUCCESS on June 8, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boulder SUCCESS on August 4, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boulder SUCCESS on August 4, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boulder SUCCESS on August 4, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR IRONMAN 70.3 Boulder SUCCESS on August 4, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR Ironman 70.3 Buffalo Springs Lake SUCCESS on June 30, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 10 weeks before your target race, this plan contains one base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 750 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 2.5 hours continuously
- Run: 80 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 14 weeks $129.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 14-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR Ironman 70.3 Buffalo Springs Lake SUCCESS on June 30, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 14 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 18 weeks $149.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 18-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR Ironman 70.3 Buffalo Springs Lake SUCCESS on June 30, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 18 weeks before your target race, this plan contains three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 60 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 24 weeks $179.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 24-week training plan is to set you up for YOUR Ironman 70.3 Buffalo Springs Lake SUCCESS on June 30, 2013.
Hand-crafted by USA Triathlon-certified coach and former pro triathlete David Glover, MS, CSCS this plan encapsulates his passion for the sport, dozens of Half and Full Ironman distance finishes (5 overall wins, 8:51 PR at Ironman distance) and his success coaching hundreds of triathletes.
Starting 24 weeks before your target race, this plan begins with a 6-week prep period (5-7 hrs) then progresses through three base periods and one build period (14 hrs max per week) prior to peaking and tapering. Following the prep period, each week typically contains 3x swims, 3x bikes and 3x runs plus 1 BRICK run. During the plan, you will build up to: 3,000 yards (or meters) swimming, 3.5 hrs biking and 2 hrs running. Your weekly schedule includes optional time allocation for strength exercises and a designated off day (Monday). We recommend using a heart rate monitor in conjunction with perceived effort but you may use power as well.
Purchase of this plan includes the comprehensive 40+ page ENDURANCEWORKS Triathlon Training Guide, which explains how to use your training plan, and, as an added bonus, Build and Maintain: Strength Training for Triathletes.
Prior to using this plan, you should be able to complete the following workouts:
- Swim: 500 meters or yards continuously
- Bike: 1.5 hours continuously
- Run: 45 min continuously
Most importantly, purchase of this program includes complimentary email access to David Glover at any time for questions that you may have about this plan.
Questions? Please visit us on the web at enduranceworks.net or email David directly at: david@enduranceworks.net.
This plan covers the final 12 week specific preparation phase of training. Training plan volume is between 8 and 13.5 hours per week.
As an added bonus, purchase of this program includes email access to Steve for any questions that you may have about this plan or your training.
Please visit us on the web at www.steve.lumley.com or email Steve at: tricoach.lum@gmail.com
by David Glover, MS, CSCS 10 weeks $109.00
“You are an Ironman!” When you cross the finish line and hear those words, you’ve accomplished something very special.
Especially designed for age group triathletes with full time jobs and other commitments, the single goal of this 10-week